blob: 3fec17ac8ccc5d64a8e1f662ccf222bee052d14d [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
Chandler Carruth2946cd72019-01-19 08:50:56 +00003// Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4// See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00006//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00007//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00008//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +00009// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000010//
11//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
12
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000013#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
14#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
22#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie31b98d22018-06-04 21:23:21 +000029#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000031#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000032#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000033#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000036#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000037#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
47#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000053#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000054#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000055#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000058#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
59#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
60#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000061#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000062#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000063#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000064#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000065#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000066#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000067#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000069#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000070#include <cassert>
71#include <climits>
72#include <cstddef>
73#include <cstdint>
74#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000075#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000076#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000077#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000078#include <utility>
79#include <vector>
80
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000081using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000082using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000083
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000084#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
85
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000086// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
87// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
88// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
89// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000090static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
91 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
92 cl::desc(
93 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
94
95static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
96 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
97 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000098
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000099static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
101 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000102
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000103static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
104 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
105 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000106
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000107static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
108 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
109 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
110 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
111 "predicated store"));
112
113static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
114 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
115 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
116 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
117
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000118static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
119 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
120 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
121 "executed"));
122
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000123static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
124 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
125 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
126 "speculatively executed instructions"));
127
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000128STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000129STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
130 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
131STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
133STATISTIC(
134 NumLookupTablesHoles,
135 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000136STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000137STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
138 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000139STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000140
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000141namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000142
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000143// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
144// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
145// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000146using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
147 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
148
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000149// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
150// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
151// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000152using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000153
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000154/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
155struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
156 ConstantInt *Value;
157 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000158
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000159 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000160 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
161
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
163 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
164 return Value < RHS.Value;
165 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000166
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000167 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
168};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000169
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000170class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000171 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000172 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000173 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000174 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000175 bool Resimplify;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000176
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000177 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000179 Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
180 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000181 BasicBlock *Pred,
182 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000183 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000184 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000185
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000186 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000187 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000188 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
189 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000190 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000191 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000192 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000193 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000194 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
195 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000196
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000197 bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
198 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
199
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000200public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000201 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000202 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000203 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000204 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000205
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000206 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000207 bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
208
209 // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
210 bool requestResimplify() {
211 Resimplify = true;
212 return true;
213 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000214};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000215
216} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000217
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000218/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000219/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000220static bool
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000221SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000222 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000223 if (SI1 == SI2)
224 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000225
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000226 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
227 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
228 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
229 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
230 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000231
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000232 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
233 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000234 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
235 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
236 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000237 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
238 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000239 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
240 if (FailBlocks)
241 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
242 Fail = true;
243 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000245
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000246 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000247}
248
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000249/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
250/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
251/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252static bool
253isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
254 Instruction *Cond,
255 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
256 if (SI1 == SI2)
257 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000258 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
259
260 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000261 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000262 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
263 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
264 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
265 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000266 if (!Ci2)
267 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000268 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
269 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
270 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
271 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
272 return false;
273
274 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
275 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000276 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000277 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
278 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
279 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000280 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
281 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000282 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000283 return false;
284 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
285 }
286 return true;
287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
290/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
291/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
292/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000293static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
294 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000295 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
296 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000297}
298
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000299/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
300/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
301/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000302/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000303static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000304 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000305 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000306 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000307 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000308}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000309
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000310/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
311/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000312/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
313/// which works well enough for us.
314///
315/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000316/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
317/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
318/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
319/// set and true is returned.
320///
321/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
322/// Select whose cost is 2.
323///
324/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
325/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
326/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000327static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000328 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000329 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000330 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
331 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000332 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
333 // so limit the recursion depth.
334 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
335 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
336 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
337 return false;
338
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000340 if (!I) {
341 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
342 // can be executed unconditionally.
343 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
344 if (C->canTrap())
345 return false;
346 return true;
347 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000348 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000349
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000350 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000351 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000352 if (PBB == BB)
353 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000354
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000355 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
356 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000357 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
358 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000359 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000360 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000361
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000362 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000363 if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000364 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000365
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
367 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
368 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000369 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000370 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000371
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000372 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000373
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000374 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
375 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
376 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
377 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
378 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
379 // enabled further IR optimizations.
380 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000381 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382 return false;
383
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000384 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
385 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000386
387 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
388 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000389 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000390 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
391 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000392 return false;
393 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000394 AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000395 return true;
396}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000397
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000398/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000400static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000401 // Normal constant int.
402 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404 return CI;
405
406 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
407 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000409
410 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
411 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
412 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
413
414 // IntToPtr const int.
415 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
416 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
417 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
418 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
419 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
420 return CI;
421 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 return cast<ConstantInt>(
423 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000424 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000425 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000426}
427
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000428namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000429
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000430/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
431/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
432/// structure.
433/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
434/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
435/// representing the different cases for the switch.
436/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
437/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
438/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
439/// fail.
440struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000442
443 /// Value found for the switch comparison
444 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
445
446 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
447 Value *Extra = nullptr;
448
449 /// Set of integers to match in switch
450 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
451
452 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
453 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000454
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000457 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000458 }
459
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000460 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000462 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000463
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000464private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
466 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
467 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000468 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
469 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 CompValue = NewVal;
471 return (CompValue != nullptr);
472 }
473
474 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
475 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
476 /// match depending on isEQ).
477 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
478 /// against is placed in CompValue.
479 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
480 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000481 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
483 ICmpInst *ICI;
484 ConstantInt *C;
485 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000486 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487 return false;
488 }
489
490 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000491 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492
493 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000494 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000495 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000496 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000497 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
498 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
499
500 /*
501 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
502 x : BITVECTOR(64);
503 y : BITVECTOR(64);
504 z : BITVECTOR(64);
505 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
506 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
507 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
508 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
510 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
511 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000512 */
513
514 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
515 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
516 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
517 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
518 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
519 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
520 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
521
522 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
523 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
524 //
525 // mask = (1 << z)
526 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
527 //
528 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
529 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
530
531 // Pattern match a special case:
532 /*
533 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
534 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
535 );
536 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000538 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
539 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000540 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000541 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000542 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543 return false;
544
545 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000546 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000547 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
548 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 UsedICmps++;
550 return true;
551 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000552 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000553
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000554 // Pattern match a special case:
555 /*
556 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
557 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
558 );
559 */
560 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
561 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
562 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
563 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
564 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
565 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
566 return false;
567
568 Vals.push_back(C);
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
570 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
571 UsedICmps++;
572 return true;
573 }
574 }
575
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000577 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578 return false;
579
580 UsedICmps++;
581 Vals.push_back(C);
582 return ICI->getOperand(0);
583 }
584
585 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000586 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
587 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588
589 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
590 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
591 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000592 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
593 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000594 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
595 }
596
597 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
598 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
599 // x != 0 && x != 1.
600 if (!isEQ)
601 Span = Span.inverse();
602
603 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000604 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000606 }
607
608 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000609 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000610 return false;
611
612 // Add all values from the range to the set
613 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
614 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000615
616 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000618 }
619
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000620 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
622 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
623 /// vector.
624 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000625 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000626 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
627 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
630 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000631 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000632
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000633 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000634 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000636
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000637 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000638 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000639
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
641 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
642 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000643 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
644 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
645 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
646 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 continue;
648 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000649
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000650 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000651 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // Match succeed, continue the loop
653 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000654 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000655
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000656 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
657 // comparison against the same value as the others.
658 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
659 if (!Extra) {
660 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000661 continue;
662 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000663 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
664 CompValue = nullptr;
665 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000666 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000667 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000668};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000669
670} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000671
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000672static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000673 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000674 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
675 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
676 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
677 if (BI->isConditional())
678 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000679 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
680 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000681 }
682
683 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000684 if (Cond)
685 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000686}
687
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000688/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000689/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000690Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000691 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000692 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
693 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
694 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Vedant Kumar4de31bb2018-11-19 19:54:27 +0000695 if (!SI->getParent()->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(128 / SI->getNumSuccessors()))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000696 CV = SI->getCondition();
697 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000698 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000699 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000700 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000701 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000702 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000703
704 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000705 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000706 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
707 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000708 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000709 CV = Ptr;
710 }
711 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000712 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000713}
714
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000715/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000716/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000717BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000718 Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000719 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000720 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000721 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
722 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
723 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000724 return SI->getDefaultDest();
725 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000726
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000727 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000728 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000729 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000730 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
731 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000732 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000733}
734
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000735/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000737static void
738EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
739 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000740 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000741}
742
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000743/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000744static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
745 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000746 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
747
748 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
749 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
750 std::swap(V1, V2);
751
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000752 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000753 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 if (V1->size() == 1) {
755 // Just scan V2.
756 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
757 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
758 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
759 return true;
760 }
761
762 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
763 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
764 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
765 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
766 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
767 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
768 return true;
769 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
770 ++i1;
771 else
772 ++i2;
773 }
774 return false;
775}
776
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000777// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
778// least one non-zero weight.
779static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
780 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
781 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
782 MDNode *N = nullptr;
783 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
784 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
785 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
786}
787
788// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
789// exactly 2 weights.
790static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
791 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
792 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
793 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
794 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
795 MDNode *N = nullptr;
796 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
797 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
798 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
799 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
800}
801
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000802/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
803/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
804/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
805/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
806/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000807bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000808 Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000809 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000810 if (!PredVal)
811 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000812
813 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
814 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
816 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000817
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000818 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
819 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
820
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000821 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000822 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000823 BasicBlock *PredDef =
824 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
825 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000826
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000828 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000829 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000830 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000831
832 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
833 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
834 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
835 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
836 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
837 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000838 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000839 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000840
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000841 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
842 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
843 // uncond br.
844 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
845 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000846 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000847 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000848
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000849 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000850 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000851
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000852 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
853 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
854 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000855
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000856 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000857 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000858 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000859
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000860 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
861 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000862 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000863 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
864 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000865
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000866 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
867 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000868
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000869 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
870 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000871 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000872 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
873 if (HasWeight)
874 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
875 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000876 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000877 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
878 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000879 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
880 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000881 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000882 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000883 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000884 Weights.pop_back();
885 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000886 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000887 SI->removeCase(i);
888 }
889 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000890 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000891 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000892
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000893 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000894 return true;
895 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000896
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000897 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
898 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000899 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000900 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000901 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
902 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000903 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000904 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000905 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
906 }
907 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000908
909 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
910 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000911 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000912 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
913 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
914 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
915 break;
916 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000917
918 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000919 if (!TheRealDest)
920 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000921
922 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
923 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000924 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
925 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
926 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000927 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000928 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000929
930 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000931 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000932 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000933
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000934 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
935 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
936 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000937
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000938 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000939 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000940}
941
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000942namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000943
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000944/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
945/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
946/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
947struct ConstantIntOrdering {
948 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
949 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
950 }
951};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000952
953} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000954
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000955static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
956 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
957 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
958 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000959 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000960 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000961 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000962}
963
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000964static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000965 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000966 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000967 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000968 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
969
970 return false;
971}
972
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000973/// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000974/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
975/// metadata.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000976static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000977 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000978 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000979 assert(MD);
980 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000981 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000982 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000983 }
984
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000985 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
986 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
987 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000988 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000989 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
990 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
991 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
992 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000993 }
994}
995
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000996/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000997static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000998 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
999 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
1000 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
1001 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1002 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +00001003 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001004}
1005
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001006/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1007/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001008/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1009/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001010bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001011 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001012 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1015 bool Changed = false;
1016
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001017 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001018 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001019 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001020
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001021 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001022 Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001023 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001024
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001025 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001026 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001027 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1028 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001029 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001030 return false;
1031 }
1032 }
1033
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001035 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001036 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1037
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001038 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001039 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1040
1041 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1042 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1043 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001044 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001045
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001046 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1047 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001048 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1049 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1050
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001051 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001052 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001053 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001054 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1055 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1056 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001057 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1058 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1059 // successor's weights
1060 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001061
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001062 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001063 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001064 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001065 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001066 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1067 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1068 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001069 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001070
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001071 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1072 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1073 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001074 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001075 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1076 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1077 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1078 else {
1079 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1080 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001081
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001082 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1083 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001084 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1085 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001086 Weights.pop_back();
1087 }
1088
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001089 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001090 --i;
1091 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001092 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001093
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001094 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001095 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1096 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1097 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1098 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1099 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001100
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001101 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1102 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001103 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1104 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1105 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1106 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1107 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001108 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1109 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1110 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1111 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001112 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1113 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001114 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001115 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001116
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001117 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1118 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1119 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1120 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1121 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1122 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1123 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1124 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001125 } else {
1126 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1127 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1128 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001129 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1130 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001131 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1132 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1133 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001134
1135 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001136 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1137 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001138 Weights.pop_back();
1139 }
1140
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001141 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1142 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001143 --i;
1144 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001145 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146
1147 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1148 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001149 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1150 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1151 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001152 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1153 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001154 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1155 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001156 PTIHandled.erase(
1157 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001158 }
1159
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001160 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1161 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001162 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001163 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001164 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1165 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001166 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001167 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001168 }
1169
1170 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1171 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1172 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001173 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1174 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001175
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001176 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001177 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001178 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001179 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001180 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001181 }
1182
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001183 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001184 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1185 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001186 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001187 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1188 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001189
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001190 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1191 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1192 FitWeights(Weights);
1193
1194 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1195
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001196 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001197 }
1198
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001199 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001200
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001201 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1202 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1203 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001204 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001205 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1206 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001207 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001208 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001209 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001210 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1211 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001212 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001213 }
1214 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1215 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001216
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001217 Changed = true;
1218 }
1219 }
1220 return Changed;
1221}
1222
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001223// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1224// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1225// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001226static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1227 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001229 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1230 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1231 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001232 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001233 return false;
1234 }
1235 }
1236 }
1237 return true;
1238}
1239
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001240static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1241
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001242/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1243/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1244/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001245static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001246 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001247 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1248 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1249 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1250 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1251 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001252 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1253 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001254
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001255 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1256 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1257
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001258 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001259 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1260 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1261 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1262 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1263 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1264 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1265 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1266 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1267 }
1268 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1269 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
1270 return false;
1271
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001272 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001273
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001274 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001275 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001276 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1277 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00001278 if (I1->isTerminator())
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001279 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001280
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001281 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1282 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1283 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1284 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1285 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1286 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1287 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1288 if (C1 && C2)
1289 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001290 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001291
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001292 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1293 return Changed;
1294
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001295 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1296 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1297 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1298 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1299 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1300 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1301 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1302 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1303 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1304 Changed = true;
1305 } else {
1306 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1307 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1308 // the now redundant second instruction.
1309 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1310 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1311 if (!I2->use_empty())
1312 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1313 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1314 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1315 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1316 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1319 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1320 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1321 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1322 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
Michael Kruse978ba612018-12-20 04:58:07 +00001323 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access,
1324 LLVMContext::MD_access_group};
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001325 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001326
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001327 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1328 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1329 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001330
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001331 I2->eraseFromParent();
1332 Changed = true;
1333 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001334
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001335 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1336 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001337 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1338 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1339 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1340 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1341 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1342 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1343 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1344 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1345 }
1346 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1347
1348 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001349
1350HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001351 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1352 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001353 return Changed;
1354
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001355 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001356 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1357 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1358 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001359 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1360 continue;
1361
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001362 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1363 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001364 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1365 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001366 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001367
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001368 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001369 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001370 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001371 return Changed;
1372 }
1373 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001374
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001375 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001376 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001377 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001378 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001379 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1380 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001381 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001382 }
1383
Jeremy Morse9b4cfa52018-11-28 17:58:45 +00001384 // Ensure terminator gets a debug location, even an unknown one, in case
1385 // it involves inlinable calls.
1386 NT->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Carlos Alberto Encisofa9cf892018-11-09 09:42:10 +00001387
Jeremy Morsef216da72019-01-14 12:13:12 +00001388 // PHIs created below will adopt NT's merged DebugLoc.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001389 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Jeremy Morse9b4cfa52018-11-28 17:58:45 +00001390
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001391 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1392 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1393 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1394 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001395 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001396 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001397 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1398 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1399 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001400 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1401 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001402
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001403 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1404 // that determines the right value.
1405 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001406 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001407 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1408 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1409 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001410
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001411 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001412 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1413 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1414 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001415 }
1416 }
1417
1418 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001419 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1420 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001421
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001422 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001423 return true;
1424}
1425
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001426// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1427// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1428// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1429// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1430// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1431static bool canSinkInstructions(
1432 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1433 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001434 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1435 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1436 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1437 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1438 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1439 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1440 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1441 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001442
1443 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1444 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1445 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1446 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1447 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1448 return false;
1449
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001450 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1451 // have no uses.
1452 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1453 return false;
1454 }
1455
1456 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1457 for (auto *I : Insts)
1458 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1459 return false;
1460
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001461 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1462 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1463 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1464 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001465 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1466 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001467 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001468 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001469 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001470 return (PNUse &&
1471 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1472 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1473 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001474 }))
1475 return false;
1476 }
1477
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001478 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1479 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1480 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1481 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1482 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1483 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1484 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1485 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1486 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1487 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1488 }))
1489 return false;
1490 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1491 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1492 }))
1493 return false;
1494
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001495 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1496 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1497 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1498 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001499
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001500 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001501 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1502 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001503 };
1504 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1505 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1506 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1507 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001508 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1509 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001510 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1511 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001512 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001513 for (auto *I : Insts)
1514 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001515 }
1516 }
1517 return true;
1518}
1519
1520// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1521// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1522// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001523static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001524 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1525
1526 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1527 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1528 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001529 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1530 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1531 do {
1532 I = I->getPrevNode();
1533 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1534 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1535 Insts.push_back(I);
1536 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001537
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001538 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1539 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1540 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1541 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001542 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001543 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1544 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1545 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1546 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1547 return U == PNUse;
1548 }))
1549 return false;
1550 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001551
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001552 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1553 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001554 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1555 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1556 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1557 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1558 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1559 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1560 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1561 // small mess we may make.
1562 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1563 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1564 });
1565 if (!NeedPHI) {
1566 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1567 continue;
1568 }
1569
1570 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1571 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1572 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1573 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1574 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1575 for (auto *I : Insts)
1576 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1577 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1578 }
1579
1580 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1581 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1582 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1583 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1584 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1585
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001586 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001587 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001588 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001589 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1590 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1591 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1592 // loop below.
1593 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1594 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1595 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1596 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001597 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001598 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1599 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001600
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001601 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1602 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1603 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1604 // instruction and nuke it.
1605 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1606 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1607 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1608 PN->eraseFromParent();
1609 }
1610
1611 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1612 for (auto *I : Insts)
1613 if (I != I0)
1614 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001615
1616 return true;
1617}
1618
1619namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001620
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001621 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1622 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1623 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1624 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1625 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1626 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1627 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1628 // ...
1629 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1630 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1631 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1632 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001633
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001634 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001635 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001636 reset();
1637 }
1638
1639 void reset() {
1640 Fail = false;
1641 Insts.clear();
1642 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001643 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1644 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1645 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1646 if (!Inst) {
1647 // Block wasn't big enough.
1648 Fail = true;
1649 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001650 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001651 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001652 }
1653 }
1654
1655 bool isValid() const {
1656 return !Fail;
1657 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001658
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001659 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001660 if (Fail)
1661 return;
1662 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001663 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1664 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001665 // Already at beginning of block.
1666 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001667 Fail = true;
1668 return;
1669 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001670 }
1671 }
1672
1673 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1674 return Insts;
1675 }
1676 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001677
1678} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001679
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001680/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1681/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1682/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1683/// than one).
1684static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001685 // We support two situations:
1686 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1687 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1688 //
1689 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1690 // else-if patterns;
1691 //
1692 // if (a) f(1);
1693 // else if (b) f(2);
1694 //
1695 // produces:
1696 //
1697 // [if]
1698 // / \
1699 // [f(1)] [if]
1700 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001701 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001702 // | [f(2)]|
1703 // \ | /
1704 // [ end ]
1705 //
1706 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1707 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1708 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1709 //
1710 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1711 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1712 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1713 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1714 //
1715 // [if]
1716 // / \
1717 // [x(1)] [if]
1718 // | | \
1719 // | | \
1720 // | [x(2)] |
1721 // \ / |
1722 // [sink.split] |
1723 // \ /
1724 // [ end ]
1725 //
1726 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1727 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001728 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001729 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1730 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1731 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1732 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1733 Cond = T;
1734 else
1735 return false;
1736 }
1737 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001738 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001739
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001740 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001741 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1742 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1743 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1744 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1745 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1746 // PHIOperands.
1747 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1748 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1749 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001750 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001751 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1752 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001753 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
1754 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001755 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1756 ++ScanIdx;
1757 --LRI;
1758 }
1759
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001760 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001761 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1762 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1763 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1764 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1765 ++NumPHIdValues;
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001766 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001767 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1768 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1769 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001770
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001771 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1772 };
1773
1774 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001775 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1776 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1777 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1778 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1779 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1780 LRI.reset();
1781 unsigned Idx = 0;
1782 bool Profitable = false;
1783 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1784 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1785 Profitable = true;
1786 break;
1787 }
1788 --LRI;
1789 ++Idx;
1790 }
1791 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001792 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001793
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001794 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001795 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1796 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001797 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001798 // Edges couldn't be split.
1799 return false;
1800 Changed = true;
1801 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001802
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001803 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1804 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1805 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1806 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1807 // per sunk instruction).
1808 //
1809 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1810 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1811 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1812 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1813 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1814 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1815 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001816 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1817 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1818 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001819
1820 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1821 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001822 LRI.reset();
1823 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001824 // Too many PHIs would be created.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001825 LLVM_DEBUG(
1826 dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001827 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001828 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001829
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001830 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001831 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001832 NumSinkCommons++;
1833 Changed = true;
1834 }
1835 return Changed;
1836}
1837
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001838/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001839/// conditional block.
1840///
1841/// We are looking for code like the following:
1842/// BrBB:
1843/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1844/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1845/// ... // function).
1846/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1847/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1848/// ThenBB:
1849/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1850/// br label EndBB
1851/// EndBB:
1852/// ...
1853/// We are going to transform this into:
1854/// BrBB:
1855/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1856/// ... //
1857/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1858/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1859/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1860/// ...
1861///
1862/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1863/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001864static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1865 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001866 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1867 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001868 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001869
1870 // Volatile or atomic.
1871 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001872 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001873
1874 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1875
1876 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001877 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001878 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001879 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1880 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001881 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001882
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001883 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001884 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001885 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001886
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001887 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1888 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1889 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1890 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1891 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001892 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001893 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001894 }
1895
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001896 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001897}
1898
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001899/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001900///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001901/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1902/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1903/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1904/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1905/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1906///
1907/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1908/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1909/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1910/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1911///
1912///
1913/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1914/// \code
1915/// BB:
1916/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1917/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1918/// ThenBB:
1919/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001920/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001921/// EndBB:
1922/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1923/// ...
1924/// \endcode
1925///
1926/// Into this IR:
1927/// \code
1928/// BB:
1929/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1930/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1931/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1932/// ...
1933/// \endcode
1934///
1935/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001936static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001937 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001938 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1939 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1940 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1941 return false;
1942
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001943 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1944 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1945
1946 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1947 // to swap the select operands later.
1948 bool Invert = false;
1949 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1950 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1951 Invert = true;
1952 }
1953 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1954
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00001955 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
1956 // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001957 // - They are defined in BB, and
1958 // - They have no side effects, and
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00001959 // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001960 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1961
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001962 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1963
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001964 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001965 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1966 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001967 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001968 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001969 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001970 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001971 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001972 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1973 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001974 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001975 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001976
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001977 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001978 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001979 ++SpeculationCost;
1980 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001981 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001982
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001983 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001984 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1985 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1986 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001987 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001988 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001989 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1990 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001991 return false;
1992
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001993 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1994 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1995 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1996
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001997 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001998 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001999 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002000 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002001 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002002 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002003 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2004
2005 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002006 }
2007 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002008
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00002009 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002010 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2011 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002012 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2013 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2014 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002015 I != E; ++I)
Craig Topperd616d332018-10-01 23:09:52 +00002016 if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002017 ++SpeculationCost;
2018 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002019 return false;
2020 }
2021
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002022 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2023 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002024 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2025 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2026 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002027
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002028 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002029 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002030 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002031 continue;
2032
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002033 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002034 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2035 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002036 return false;
2037
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002038 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002039 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2040 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2041 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002042 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2043
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002044 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2045 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002046 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002047 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2048 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002049 unsigned MaxCost =
2050 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002051 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002052 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002053
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002054 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2055 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2056 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002057 // constant expression.
2058 ++SpeculationCost;
2059 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002060 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002061 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002062
2063 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2064 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002065 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002066 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002067
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002068 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002069 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002070
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002071 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2072 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002073 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002074 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2075 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2076 if (Invert)
2077 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002078 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002079 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002080 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002081 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2082 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002083 }
2084
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002085 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2086 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002087 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002088 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2089
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002090 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002091 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2092 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002093
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002094 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002095 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002096 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2097 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2098 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2099 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2100 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002101
2102 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2103 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2104 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002105
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002106 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002107 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2108 // destinations were inverted.
2109 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002110 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002111 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002112 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002113 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002114 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2115 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002116 }
2117
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002118 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2119 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2120 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2121 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2122 I->eraseFromParent();
2123
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002124 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002125 return true;
2126}
2127
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002128/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002129static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002130 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002131
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002132 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002133 if (Size > 10)
2134 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002135 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002136
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002137 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002138 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002139 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002140 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2142 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002143 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002145 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2146 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002147
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002148 return true;
2149}
2150
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002151/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2152/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2153/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002154static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2155 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002156 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2157 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002158 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2159 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002160 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2161 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002162
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002163 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2164 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002165 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002166 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002167 }
2168
2169 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002170 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2171 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002172
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002173 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002174 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002175 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2176 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2177 }))
2178 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002179
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002180 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2181 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002182 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002183 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002184 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2185 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002186
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2188 // branch to RealDest.
2189 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2190 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002191
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002192 if (RealDest == BB)
2193 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002194 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002195 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2196 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002197
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002198 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2199 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2200 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2201 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002202 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2203 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2204 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002205 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002206
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002207 // Update PHI nodes.
2208 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002209
2210 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2211 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2212 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2213 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002214 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002215 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2216 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2217 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2218 continue;
2219 }
2220 // Clone the instruction.
2221 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002222 if (BBI->hasName())
2223 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002224
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002225 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002226 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2227 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002228 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2229 *i = PI->second;
2230 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002231
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002232 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002233 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002234 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2235 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2236 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002237 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002238 N = nullptr;
2239 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002240 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002242 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002243 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002244 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2245 if (N)
2246 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002247
2248 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2249 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2250 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2251 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002252 }
2253
2254 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2255 // to EdgeBB instead.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002256 Instruction *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002257 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2258 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2259 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2260 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2261 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002262
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002263 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00002264 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) || true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002265 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002266
2267 return false;
2268}
2269
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002270/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2271/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002272static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2273 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002274 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2275 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2276 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2277 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2278 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2279 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002280 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002281 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2282 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2283 return false;
2284
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002285 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2286 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002287 if (!IfCond ||
2288 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2289 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2290 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002291
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002292 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2293 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2294 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2295 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2296 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2297 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2298 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2299 if (NumPhis > 2)
2300 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002301
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002302 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2303 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2304 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002305 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002306 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2307 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002308 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2309 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002310
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002311 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2312 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002313 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002314 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002315 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002316 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002317 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002318
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +00002319 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002320 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +00002321 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002322 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002323 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002324 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002325
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002326 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002327 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2328 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002329 if (!PN)
2330 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002331
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002332 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2333 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2334 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2335 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2336 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2337 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2338 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002339
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002340 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2341 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2342 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2343 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002344 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002345 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2346 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2347 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002348 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002349 } else {
2350 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002351 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002352 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002353 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002354 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2355 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002356 return false;
2357 }
2358 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002359
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002360 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002361 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002362 } else {
2363 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002364 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002365 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002366 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002367 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2368 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002369 return false;
2370 }
2371 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002372
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002373 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond
2374 << " T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2375 << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002376
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002377 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2378 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002379 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002380 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002381
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002382 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2383 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Carlos Alberto Enciso9a24e1a2018-10-25 09:58:59 +00002384 if (IfBlock1)
2385 hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock1);
2386 if (IfBlock2)
2387 hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock2);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002388
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002389 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2390 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002391 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002392 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002394 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2395 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2396 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002397 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002398 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002399
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002400 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2401 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2402 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002403 Instruction *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002404 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2405 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002406 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002407 return true;
2408}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002409
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002410/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2411/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002412/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002413static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002414 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002415 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2416 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2417 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2418 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2419 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002420
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002421 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2422 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2423 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002424 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002425 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002426 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002427 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002428
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002429 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002430 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2431 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2432 // branch into a return.
2433 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2434 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2435 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002436 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002437 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002438 return true;
2439 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002440
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002441 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2442 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2443 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2444 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002445
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002446 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2447 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2448 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2449 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2450 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2451 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2452 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002453
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002454 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2455 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2456 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2457 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2458 // safe.
2459 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2460 if (TCV->canTrap())
2461 return false;
2462 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2463 if (FCV->canTrap())
2464 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002465
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002466 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2467 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2468 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2469 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002470
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002471 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2472 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002473 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002474 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002475 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2476 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2477 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2478 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002479 TrueValue =
2480 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002481 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002482 }
2483
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002484 Value *RI =
2485 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002486
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002487 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002488
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002489 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2490 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI << "TRUEBLOCK: "
2491 << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002492
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002493 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002494
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002495 return true;
2496}
2497
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002498/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002500static bool tryCSEWithPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002501 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2502 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002503 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2504 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002505 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2506 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2507 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2508 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2509 return true;
2510 }
2511 }
2512 return false;
2513}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002514
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002515/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2516/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2517/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2518static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2519 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2520 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2521 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2522 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2523 bool PredHasWeights =
2524 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2525 bool SuccHasWeights =
2526 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2527 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2528 if (!PredHasWeights)
2529 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2530 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2531 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2532 return true;
2533 } else {
2534 return false;
2535 }
2536}
2537
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002538/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2539/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2540/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002541bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002542 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002543
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002544 const unsigned PredCount = pred_size(BB);
2545
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002546 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002547 if (BI->isConditional())
2548 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2549 else {
2550 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2551 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002552 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002553 // predecessor.
2554 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2555 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2556 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2557 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2558 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002559 for (auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin(),
2560 E = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().end();
2561 I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002562 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002563 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2564 Cond = Curr;
2565 break;
2566 }
2567 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002568 if (!tryCSEWithPredecessor(Curr, PB))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002569 return false;
2570 }
2571 }
2572
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002573 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002574 return false;
2575 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002576
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002577 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2578 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002579 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002580
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002581 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002582 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002583
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002584 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002585 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2586 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002587
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002588 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002589 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002590
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002591 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2592 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2593 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2594 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002595 // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
2596 // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002597 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002598 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002599 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2600 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2601 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002602 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002603 return false;
2604 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2605 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2606 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2607 return false;
2608 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2609 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2610 // and Cond.
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002611
2612 // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
2613 // predecessor.
2614 NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002615 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2616 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2617 return false;
2618 }
2619
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002620 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2621 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2622 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2623 if (CE->canTrap())
2624 return false;
2625 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2626 if (CE->canTrap())
2627 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002628
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002629 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002630 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002631 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002632 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2633 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002634
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002635 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2636 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002637 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002638
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002639 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2640 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2641 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002642 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002643 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002644 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002645 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2646 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002647 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002648
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002649 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002650 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002651 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002652
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002653 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002654 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002655 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002656 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002657 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002658 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2659 Opc = Instruction::And;
2660 InvertPredCond = true;
2661 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2662 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2663 InvertPredCond = true;
2664 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002665 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002666 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002667 } else {
2668 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2669 continue;
2670 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002671
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002672 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002673 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002674
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002675 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2676 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002677 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002678
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002679 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2680 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2681 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2682 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002683 NewCond =
2684 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002685 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002686
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002687 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002688 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002689 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002690
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002692 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002693 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2694 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2695 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002696 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002697 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002698 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002699 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2700 continue;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002701 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2702 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002703 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002704 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002705
2706 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2707 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2708 // only given the branch precondition.
2709 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2710 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002711 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002712
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002713 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2714 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002715 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002716 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002717
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002718 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2719 // two conditions together.
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002720 Instruction *CondInPred = Cond->clone();
2721 RemapInstruction(CondInPred, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002722 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002723 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), CondInPred);
2724 CondInPred->takeName(Cond);
2725 Cond->setName(CondInPred->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002726
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002727 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002728 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002729 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002730 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2731
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002732 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002733 bool HasWeights =
2734 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2735 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002736 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2737
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002738 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002739 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002740 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2741 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002742 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002744 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002745 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2746 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2747 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002748 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2749 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2750 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002751 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002752 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2753 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2754 }
2755 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002756 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002757 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2758 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002759 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002760 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002761 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2762 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2763 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2764 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002765 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2766 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002767 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2768 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2769 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002770 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2771 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2772 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2773
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002774 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2775 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002776 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002777 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002778 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002779 } else {
2780 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2781 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002782 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002783 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002784 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002785 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002786 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2787 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2788 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2789 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002790 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2791 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2792 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002793 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, CondInPred,
2794 "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002795 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002796 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2797 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002798 } else {
2799 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2800 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2801 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002802 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002803 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002804 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002805 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2806 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2807 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2808 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002809 }
2810 }
2811 // Update PHI Node.
2812 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2813 MergedCond);
2814 }
2815 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2816 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002817 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PBI);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002818 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002819 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002820
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002821 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2822 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2823 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2824 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2825
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002826 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2827 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002828
2829 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2830 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2831 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2832 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
2833
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002834 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002835 }
2836 return false;
2837}
2838
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002839// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2840// nullptr.
2841static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2842 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2843 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2844 if (!BB)
2845 continue;
2846 for (auto &I : *BB)
2847 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2848 if (S)
2849 // Multiple stores seen.
2850 return nullptr;
2851 else
2852 S = SI;
2853 }
2854 }
2855 return S;
2856}
2857
2858static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2859 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2860 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2861 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2862 //
2863 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2864 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2865 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2866 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2867 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2868 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2869 // one.
2870 //
2871 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2872 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2873 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2874 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2875 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002876
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002877 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2878 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2879 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2880 if (!AlternativeV)
2881 break;
2882
Vedant Kumar4de31bb2018-11-19 19:54:27 +00002883 assert(Succ->hasNPredecessors(2));
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002884 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2885 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2886 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2887 break;
2888 PHI = nullptr;
2889 }
2890 if (PHI)
2891 return PHI;
2892
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002893 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2894 if (!AlternativeV &&
2895 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2896 return V;
2897
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002898 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002899 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2900 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2901 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002902 PHI->addIncoming(
2903 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002904 return PHI;
2905}
2906
2907static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2908 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2909 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002910 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2911 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002912 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2913 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2914 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2915 };
2916
2917 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2918 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2919 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2920 if (!BB)
2921 return true;
2922 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2923 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2924 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002925 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002926 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002927 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2928 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2929 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2930 ++N;
2931 // Free instructions.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002932 else if (I.isTerminator() || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002933 continue;
2934 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002935 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002936 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002937 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2938 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2939 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002940 };
2941
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002942 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2943 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2944 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002945 return false;
2946
2947 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2948 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2949 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2950 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2951 // testing.
2952 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2953 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2954 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2955 return false;
2956
2957 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2958 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2959 return false;
2960
2961 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2962 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2963 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2964 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2965 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2966 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2967 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2968 //
2969 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2970 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2971 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2972 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2973 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2974 return false;
2975 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2976 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2977 return false;
2978 if (QTB)
2979 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2980 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2981 return false;
2982 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2983 I != E; ++I)
2984 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2985 return false;
2986
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002987 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2988 // sink the store.
2989 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2990 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
2991 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
2992 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
2993 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
2994 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
2995 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
2996 "condstore.split");
2997 if (!NewBB)
2998 return false;
2999 PostBB = NewBB;
3000 }
3001
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003002 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
3003 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
3004 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3005 ->getCondition();
3006 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3007 ->getCondition();
3008
3009 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3010 PStore->getParent());
3011 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3012 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3013
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003014 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3015
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003016 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3017 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3018
3019 if (InvertPCond)
3020 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3021 if (InvertQCond)
3022 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3023 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3024
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003025 auto *T =
3026 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003027 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3028 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3029 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3030 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3031 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3032 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003033 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3034 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3035 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3036 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3037 unsigned MinAlignment;
3038 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3039 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3040 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3041 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3042 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3043 // store that doesn't execute.
3044 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3045 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3046 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3047 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3048 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3049 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3050 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3051 } else {
3052 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3053 // the stored value.
3054 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3055 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003056
3057 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3058 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003059
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003060 return true;
3061}
3062
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003063static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3064 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003065 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3066 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3067 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3068 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3069 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3070 // PBI and QBI.
3071 //
3072 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3073 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3074 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3075 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3076 //
3077 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3078 //
3079 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3080 // / \ | \
3081 // PTB PFB | PFB
3082 // \ / | /
3083 // QBI QBI
3084 // / \ | \
3085 // QTB QFB | QFB
3086 // \ / | /
3087 // PostBB PostBB
3088 //
3089 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3090 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3091 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003092 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3093 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3094 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3095 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3096 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3097
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003098 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3099 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3100 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3101 PostBB = QFB;
3102
3103 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3104 if (!PostBB)
3105 return false;
3106
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003107 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3108 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3109 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3110 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3111 InvertPCond = true;
3112 }
3113 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3114 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3115 InvertQCond = true;
3116 }
3117
3118 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3119 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3120 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3121 PTB = nullptr;
3122 if (QTB == PostBB)
3123 QTB = nullptr;
3124
3125 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3126 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3127 // predecessor.
3128 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003129 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003130 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003131 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003132 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3133 return false;
3134 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3135 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3136 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003137 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003138 return false;
3139
3140 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3141 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003142 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003143 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3144 if (!BB)
3145 continue;
3146 for (auto &I : *BB)
3147 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3148 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3149 }
3150 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3151 if (!BB)
3152 continue;
3153 for (auto &I : *BB)
3154 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3155 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3156 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003157
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003158 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3159 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3160 // clear what it contains.
3161 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3162
3163 bool Changed = false;
3164 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3165 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003166 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003167 return Changed;
3168}
3169
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003170/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3171/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003172/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3173/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003174static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3175 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003176 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3177 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003178
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003179 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003180 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003181 // this conditional branch redundant.
3182 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3183 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3184 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3185 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3186 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3187 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3188 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003189 BI->setCondition(
3190 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3191 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003192 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003193
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003194 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3195 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3196 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3197 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003198 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003199 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3200 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3201 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003202 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3203 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3204 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003205 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003206 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003207 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3208 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003209 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3210 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003211 NewPN->addIncoming(
3212 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3213 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003214 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003215 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003216 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003217 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003218
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003219 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003220 return true;
3221 }
3222 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003223
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003224 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3225 if (CE->canTrap())
3226 return false;
3227
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003228 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3229 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3230 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003231 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003232 return true;
3233
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003234 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003235 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003236 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003237
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003238 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003239 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003240 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003241
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003242 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003243 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3244 PBIOp = 0;
3245 BIOp = 0;
3246 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3247 PBIOp = 0;
3248 BIOp = 1;
3249 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3250 PBIOp = 1;
3251 BIOp = 0;
3252 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3253 PBIOp = 1;
3254 BIOp = 1;
3255 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003256 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003257 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003258
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003259 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3260 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3261 // keep getting unwound.
3262 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3263 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003264
3265 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003266 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3267 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003268
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003269 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3270 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3271 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3272
3273 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003274 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003275 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3276 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003277 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3278 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003279
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003280 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3281 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3282 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3283 if (CE->canTrap())
3284 return false;
3285
3286 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3287 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3288 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3289 if (CE->canTrap())
3290 return false;
3291 }
3292
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003293 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003294 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003295
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003296 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3297 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003298
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003299 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3300 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3301 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3302 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3303 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3304 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3305 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3306 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3307 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3308 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003309 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3310 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003311 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3312 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003313 }
3314
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003315 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003316
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003317 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3318 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003319
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003320 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3321 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003322 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003323 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003324 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003325
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003326 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3327 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003328 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003329
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003330 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003331 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003332
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003333 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3334 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3335 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3336 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003337
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003338 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3339 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003340 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003341 bool HasWeights =
3342 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3343 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003344 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003345 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3346 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3347 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3348 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003349 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3350 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3351 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003352 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3353 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3354 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003355 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003356 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3357
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003358 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003359 }
3360
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003361 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3362 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003363 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003364
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003365 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3366 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3367 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3368 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003369 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3370 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3371 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3372 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003373 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3374 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003375 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3376 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003377 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003378 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3379 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3380 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3381 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003382 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003383 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3384 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3385 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3386 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3387 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3388 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3389 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3390 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3391
3392 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3393
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003394 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003395 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003396 }
3397 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003398
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003399 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3400 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003401
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003402 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3403 // one fewer predecessor.
3404 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003405}
3406
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003407// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3408// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003409// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3410// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3411// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003412static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003413 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3414 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003415 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003416 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3417 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3418 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3419 // successor.
3420 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003421 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003422
3423 // Then remove the rest.
Chandler Carruth96fc1de2018-08-26 08:41:15 +00003424 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003425 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3426 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003427 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003428 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003429 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003430 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003431 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3432 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003433 }
3434
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003435 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3436 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3437
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003438 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003439 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003440 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3441 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3442 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003443 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003444 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003445 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3446 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003447 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3448 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003449 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003450 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003451 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3452 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3453 // terminator must be unreachable.
3454 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3455 } else {
3456 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3457 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3458 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003459 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003460 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003461 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003462 else
3463 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003464 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003465 }
3466
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003467 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003468 return true;
3469}
3470
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003471// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003472// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3473// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3474// unconditional otherwise.
3475static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3476 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3477 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3478 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3479 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3480 return false;
3481
3482 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3483 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003484 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3485 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003486
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003487 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3488 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3489 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3490 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3491 if (HasWeights) {
3492 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3493 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003494 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003495 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003496 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003497 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003498 }
3499 }
3500
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003501 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003502 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3503 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003504}
3505
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003506// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003507// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3508// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3509// with
3510// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3511static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3512 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3513 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3514 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3515 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3516 return false;
3517
3518 // Extract the actual blocks.
3519 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3520 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3521
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003522 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003523 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3524 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003525}
3526
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003527/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3528/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003529/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3530/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3531/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3532/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3533/// like:
3534///
3535/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3536/// DEFAULT:
3537/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3538/// br label %end
3539/// end:
3540/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003541///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003542/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3543/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003544bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
3545 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003546 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003547
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003548 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3549 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003550 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3551 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003552
3553 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3554 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003555
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003556 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3557 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3558 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3559 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003560 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3561 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003562
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003563 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3564 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3565 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003566
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003567 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3568 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3569 // away.
3570 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3571 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3572 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3573 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003574
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003575 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003576 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003577 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3578 }
3579 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003580 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003581 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003582
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003583 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3584 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3585 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003586 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003587 Value *V;
3588 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3589 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3590 else
3591 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003592
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003593 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3594 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3595 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003596 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003597 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003598
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003599 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3600 // the block.
3601 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003602 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003603 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003604 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3605 return false;
3606
3607 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3608 // true in the PHI.
3609 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003610 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003611
3612 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3613 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3614
3615 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3616 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3617 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3618 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3619
3620 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3621 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003622 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3623 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003624 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3625 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3626 if (HasWeights) {
3627 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3628 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3629 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003630 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003631 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3632
3633 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003634 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003635 }
3636 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003637 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003638
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003639 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003640 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3641 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3642 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003643 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3644 return true;
3645}
3646
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003647/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003648/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3649/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003650static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3651 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003652 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003653 if (!Cond)
3654 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003655
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003656 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3657 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3658 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003659
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003660 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003661 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3662 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003663 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003664 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3665 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3666 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003667
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003668 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003669 if (!CompVal)
3670 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003671
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003672 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3673 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3674 return false;
3675
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003676 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3677
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003678 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3679 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3680 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3681 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003682
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003683 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003684 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003685 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3686 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003687
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003688 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3689 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3690
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003691 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3692 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003693 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3694 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3695 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003696
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003697 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003698
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003699 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
3700 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3701 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003702
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003703 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3704 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3705 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3706 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003707 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3708 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003709 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003710 Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003711 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3712
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003713 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003714 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003715 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003716 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003717
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003718 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003719
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003720 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3721 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003722 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003723
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003724 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3725 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003726 BB = NewBB;
3727 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003728
3729 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003730 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3731 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003732 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3733 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003734 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003735
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003736 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003737 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003738
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003739 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3740 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3741 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003742
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003743 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3744 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3745 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003746 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003747 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3748 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003749 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003750 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3751 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003752
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003753 // Erase the old branch instruction.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003754 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003755
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003756 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003757 return true;
3758}
3759
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003760bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003761 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3762 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3763 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3764 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3765 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3766 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003767
3768 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003769}
3770
3771// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3772bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3773 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3774
3775 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3776 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3777 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003778 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003779 while (++I != E)
3780 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3781 return false;
3782
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003783 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003784 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3785
3786 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003787 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3788 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003789 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3790 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3791
3792 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3793 // it has other dependents.
3794 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3795 continue;
3796
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003797 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003798 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3799 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3800 continue;
3801
3802 bool isTrivial = true;
3803
3804 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3805 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3806 while (++I != E)
3807 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3808 isTrivial = false;
3809 break;
3810 }
3811
3812 if (isTrivial)
3813 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3814 }
3815
3816 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003817 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3818 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003819
3820 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3821 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3822 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3823 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3824 // to remove them all.
3825 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3826 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3827
3828 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3829 PI != PE;) {
3830 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3831 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3832 }
3833
3834 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3835 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3836 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3837 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3838 // predecessors.
3839 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3840 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3841 }
3842
3843 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3844 if (pred_empty(BB))
3845 BB->eraseFromParent();
3846
3847 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3848}
3849
3850// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3851bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003852 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3853 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003854 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3855 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003856
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003857 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3858 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003859 while (++I != E)
3860 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3861 return false;
3862
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003863 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003864 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3865 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3866 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003867 }
3868
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003869 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003870 if (LoopHeaders)
3871 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00003872 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003873 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003874}
3875
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003876static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003877 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3878 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3879 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3880 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3881 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3882 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3883 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3884 // simplified.
3885 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003886 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3887 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003888 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3889 return false;
3890
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003891 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3892 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3893 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3894 return false;
3895
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003896 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003897 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003898 while (++I != E) {
3899 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3900 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003901 return false;
3902
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003903 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3904 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3905 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3906 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
Shiva Chen2c864552018-05-09 02:40:45 +00003907 case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003908 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3909 break;
3910 default:
3911 return false;
3912 }
3913 }
3914
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003915 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3916 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003917 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003918 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003919
3920 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3921 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3922 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3923 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3924 // are both EH pads).
3925 if (UnwindDest) {
3926 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3927 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003928 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003929 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003930 I != IE; ++I) {
3931 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003932
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003933 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003934 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003935 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003936 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3937 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3938 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3939 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3940 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3941 // pad being removed.
3942 //
3943 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3944 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3945 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3946 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3947 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3948 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3949
3950 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3951 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3952
3953 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3954 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3955 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3956 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003957 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003958 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003959 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3960 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3961 }
3962 } else {
3963 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3964 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3965 // predecessors with this value.
3966 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3967 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3968 }
3969 }
3970 }
3971
3972 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003973 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003974 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3975 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003976 I != IE;) {
3977 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3978 // being moved to another block.
3979 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3980 if (PN->use_empty())
3981 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3982 // when we erase BB below.
3983 continue;
3984
3985 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3986 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3987 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3988 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3989 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3990 if (pred != BB)
3991 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3992 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3993 }
3994 }
3995
3996 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3997 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3998 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003999 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004000 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004001 } else {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004002 Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004003 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004004 }
4005 }
4006
4007 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
4008 BB->eraseFromParent();
4009 return true;
4010}
4011
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004012// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4013static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4014 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4015 // with.
4016 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4017 if (!UnwindDest)
4018 return false;
4019
4020 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4021 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4022 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4023 return false;
4024
4025 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4026 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4027 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4028 return false;
4029
4030 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4031 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4032 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4033 // funclet bundle operands.
4034 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4035 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4036 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4037 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4038 // destination.
4039 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4040 RI->eraseFromParent();
4041
4042 return true;
4043}
4044
4045bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004046 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4047 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4048 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4049 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4050 return false;
4051
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004052 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004053 return true;
4054
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004055 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004056 return true;
4057
4058 return false;
4059}
4060
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004061bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004062 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004063 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4064 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004065
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004066 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004067 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4068 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004069 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4070 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004071 Instruction *PTI = P->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004072 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4073 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4074 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4075 else
4076 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4077 }
4078 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004079
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004080 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004081 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004082 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4083 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004084 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4085 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004086 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004087 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004088
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004089 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004090 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004091 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004092 if (LoopHeaders)
4093 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004094 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004095 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004096
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004097 return true;
4098 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004099
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004100 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4101 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4102 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4103 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4104 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004105
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004106 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4107 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4108 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004109 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004110 return true;
4111 }
4112 return false;
4113}
4114
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004115bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4116 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004117
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004118 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004119
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004120 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4121 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004122 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4123 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004124 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004125 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4126 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4127 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004128 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4129 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004130
4131 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004132 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004133 if (SI->isVolatile())
4134 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004135 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004136 if (LI->isVolatile())
4137 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004138 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004139 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4140 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004141 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004142 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4143 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004144 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4145 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4146 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4147 // default.
4148 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4149 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4150 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4151 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004152 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4153 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004154 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004155 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004156 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4157 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4158 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4159 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004160 }
4161
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004162 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4163 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4164 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004165 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004166 Changed = true;
4167 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004168
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004169 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4170 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004171 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4172 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004173
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004174 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004175 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004176 Instruction *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004177 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004178 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004179 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4180 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4181 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4182 TI->eraseFromParent();
4183 Changed = true;
4184 }
4185 } else {
4186 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004187 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004188 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004189 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004190 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004191 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004192 Changed = true;
4193 }
4194 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004195 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004196 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004197 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004198 ++i;
4199 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004200 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004201 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4202 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4203 e = SI->case_end();
4204 Changed = true;
4205 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004206 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4207 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4208 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4209 Changed = true;
4210 }
4211 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4212 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4213 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4214 Changed = true;
4215 continue;
4216 }
4217
4218 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4219 E = CSI->handler_end();
4220 I != E; ++I) {
4221 if (*I == BB) {
4222 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4223 --I;
4224 --E;
4225 Changed = true;
4226 }
4227 }
4228 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4229 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4230 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4231 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4232 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4233 } else {
4234 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4235 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4236 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4237 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4238 }
4239 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4240 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4241 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4242 Changed = true;
4243 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004244 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004245 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4246 TI->eraseFromParent();
4247 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004248 }
4249 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004250
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004251 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004252 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004253 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004254 if (LoopHeaders)
4255 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004256 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004257 return true;
4258 }
4259
4260 return Changed;
4261}
4262
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004263static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4264 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4265
4266 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4267 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4268 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4269 return false;
4270 }
4271 return true;
4272}
4273
4274/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4275/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004276static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004277 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004278
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004279 bool HasDefault =
4280 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004281
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004282 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4283 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4284 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004285 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4286 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004287
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004288 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4289 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004290 if (!DestA)
4291 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004292 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004293 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004294 continue;
4295 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004296 if (!DestB)
4297 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004298 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004299 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004300 continue;
4301 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004302 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004303 }
4304
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004305 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4306 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004307 assert(DestA != DestB);
4308 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4309 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4310 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4311
4312 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4313 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4314 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4315 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4316 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4317 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4318 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4319 OtherDest = DestB;
4320 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4321 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4322 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4323 OtherDest = DestA;
4324 } else
4325 return false;
4326
4327 // Start building the compare and branch.
4328
4329 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004330 Constant *NumCases =
4331 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004332
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004333 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4334 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004335 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4336
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004337 Value *Cmp;
4338 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004339 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004340 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4341 else
4342 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004343 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004344
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004345 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004346 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4347 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004348 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4349 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004350 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4351 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4352 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4353 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4354 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4355 else
4356 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4357 }
4358 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4359 TrueWeight /= 2;
4360 FalseWeight /= 2;
4361 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004362 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004363 }
4364 }
4365
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004366 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4367 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4368 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004369 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4370 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004371 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004372 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4373 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004374 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4375 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004376 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4377 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004378 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4379 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4380 }
4381
4382 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004383 SI->eraseFromParent();
4384
4385 return true;
4386}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004387
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004388/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004389/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004390static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004391 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004392 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004393 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004394 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004395
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004396 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4397 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4398 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004399 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004400 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4401
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004402 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004403 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004404 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004405 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004406 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004407 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004408 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004409 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
4410 << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004411 }
4412 }
4413
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004414 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4415 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004416 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4417 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004418 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004419 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4420 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004421 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004422 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004423 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004424 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004425 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004426 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004427 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4428 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004429 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4430 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004431 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4432 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004433 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTI);
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004434 return true;
4435 }
4436
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004437 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4438 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4439 if (HasWeight) {
4440 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4441 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4442 }
4443
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004444 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004445 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004446 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4447 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004448 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004449 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004450 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004451 Weights.pop_back();
4452 }
4453
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004454 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004455 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4456 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004457 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004458 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004459 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004460 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004461 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004462
4463 return !DeadCases.empty();
4464}
4465
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004466/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4467/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004468/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4469/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4470/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4471static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004472 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004473 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004474 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004475 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004476 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004477
4478 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4479 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004480 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004481
4482 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4483
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004484 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4485 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004486 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4487
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004488 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004489 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4490 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004491
4492 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004493 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004494 }
4495
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004496 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004497}
4498
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004499/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4500/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004501/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004502static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004503 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4504
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004505 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004506 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4507 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004508 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004509 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4510 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004511
4512 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4513 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4514 // switchbb:
4515 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4516 // i32 17, label %succ
4517 // ...
4518 // succ:
4519 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4520 // -->
4521 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4522
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004523 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004524 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4525 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4526 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4527 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4528 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004529 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4530 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4531 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4532 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004533 Changed = true;
4534 }
4535 }
4536
4537 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004538 int PhiIdx;
4539 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4540 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004541 }
4542
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004543 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4544 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4545 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004546 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4547 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004548
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004549 for (int Index : Indexes)
4550 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004551 Changed = true;
4552 }
4553
4554 return Changed;
4555}
4556
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004557/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004558/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004559static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004560 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4561 return false;
4562 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4563 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004564
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004565 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4566 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4567 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4568 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004569
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004570 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004571 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4572 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004573 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4574 return false;
4575 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004576
4577 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4578 return false;
4579
4580 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004581}
4582
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004583/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004584/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004585static Constant *
4586LookupConstant(Value *V,
4587 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004588 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4589 return C;
4590 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4591}
4592
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004593/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004594/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4595/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004596/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004597static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004598ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4599 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004600 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004601 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4602 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004603 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004604 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4605 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4606 if (A->isNullValue())
4607 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004608 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004609 }
4610
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004611 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4612 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4613 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4614 COps.push_back(A);
4615 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004616 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004617 }
4618
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004619 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004620 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4621 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004622 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004623
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004624 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004625}
4626
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004627/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004628/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004629/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004630/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004631static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004632GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004633 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004634 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004635 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004636 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4637 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4638
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004639 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4640 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004641 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004642 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004643 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004644 if (I.isTerminator()) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004645 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004646 if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004647 return false;
4648 Pred = CaseDest;
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004649 CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004650 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004651 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004652
4653 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4654 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4655 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004656 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004657 User *User = Use.getUser();
4658 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4659 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4660 continue;
4661 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4662 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4663 continue;
4664 return false;
4665 }
4666
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004667 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004668 } else {
4669 break;
4670 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004671 }
4672
4673 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4674 if (!*CommonDest)
4675 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4676 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4677 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4678 return false;
4679
4680 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004681 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4682 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004683 if (Idx == -1)
4684 continue;
4685
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004686 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004687 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004688 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004689 return false;
4690
4691 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004692 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004693 return false;
4694
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004695 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004696 }
4697
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004698 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004699}
4700
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004701// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004702// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4703static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4704 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4705 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004706 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4707 if (I.first == Result) {
4708 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004709 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004710 }
4711 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004712 UniqueResults.push_back(
4713 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004714 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004715}
4716
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004717// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004718// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4719// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4720// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004721static bool
4722InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4723 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4724 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4725 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4726 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004727 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4728 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4729
4730 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4731 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4732 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004733 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004734 return false;
4735
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004736 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004737 if (Results.size() > 1)
4738 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004739
4740 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4741 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4742 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4743
4744 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4745 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4746 return false;
4747
4748 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4749 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4750 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004751
4752 // Check the PHI consistency.
4753 if (!PHI)
4754 PHI = Results[0].first;
4755 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4756 return false;
4757 }
4758 // Find the default result value.
4759 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4760 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4761 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004762 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004763 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4764 // is unreachable.
4765 DefaultResult =
4766 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4767 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004768 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004769 return false;
4770
4771 return true;
4772}
4773
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004774// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4775// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004776// Example:
4777// switch (a) {
4778// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4779// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4780// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4781// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4782// default:
4783// return 4;
4784// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004785static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4786 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4787 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004788 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004789 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004790 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4791 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4792 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4793 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4794 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4795 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4796
4797 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4798 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4799 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4800 Value *const ValueCompare =
4801 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4802 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4803 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4804 }
4805 Value *const ValueCompare =
4806 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004807 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4808 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004809 }
4810
4811 return nullptr;
4812}
4813
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004814// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4815// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004816static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4817 Value *SelectValue,
4818 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4819 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4820 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4821 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4822 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4823
4824 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4825
4826 // Remove the switch.
4827 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4828 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4829
4830 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4831 continue;
4832 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4833 }
4834 SI->eraseFromParent();
4835}
4836
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004837/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004838/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4839/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004840static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4841 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004842 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004843 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4844 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4845 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4846 Constant *DefaultResult;
4847 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4848 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004849 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004850 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004851 return false;
4852 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4853 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4854 return false;
4855 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4856
4857 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004858 Value *SelectValue =
4859 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004860 if (SelectValue) {
4861 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4862 return true;
4863 }
4864 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4865 return false;
4866}
4867
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004868namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004869
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004870/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4871class SwitchLookupTable {
4872public:
4873 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4874 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4875 SwitchLookupTable(
4876 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4877 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004878 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004879
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004880 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4881 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4882 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004883
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004884 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4885 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4886 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4887 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004888
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004889private:
4890 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4891 // different ways.
4892 enum {
4893 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4894 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4895 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004896
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004897 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4898 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4899 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4900 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004901
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004902 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4903 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4904 // shift and mask operations.
4905 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004906
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004907 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4908 // instructions from the table.
4909 ArrayKind
4910 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004911
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004912 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004913 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004914
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004915 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004916 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4917 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004918
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004919 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004920 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4921 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004922
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004923 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004924 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004925};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004926
4927} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004928
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004929SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4930 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4931 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004932 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004933 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4934 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004935
4936 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004937 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004938
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004939 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4940
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004941 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004942 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004943 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4944 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4945 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004946 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004947
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004948 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004949 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4950
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004951 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004952 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004953 }
4954
4955 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004956 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004957 assert(DefaultValue &&
4958 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004959 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004960 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4961 if (!TableContents[I])
4962 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004963 }
4964
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004965 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004966 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004967 }
4968
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004969 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4970 // that single value.
4971 if (SingleValue) {
4972 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4973 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004974 }
4975
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004976 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4977 // table index.
4978 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4979 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4980 APInt PrevVal;
4981 APInt DistToPrev;
4982 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4983 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4984 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4985 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4986 if (!ConstVal) {
4987 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4988 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4989 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4990 break;
4991 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004992 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004993 if (I != 0) {
4994 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4995 if (I == 1) {
4996 DistToPrev = Dist;
4997 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4998 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4999 break;
5000 }
5001 }
5002 PrevVal = Val;
5003 }
5004 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5005 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5006 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5007 Kind = LinearMapKind;
5008 ++NumLinearMaps;
5009 return;
5010 }
5011 }
5012
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005013 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005014 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005015 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005016 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5017 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5018 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005019 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5020 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5021 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5022 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5023 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005024 }
5025 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5026 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5027 Kind = BitMapKind;
5028 ++NumBitMaps;
5029 return;
5030 }
5031
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005032 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005033 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005034 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5035
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005036 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5037 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005038 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005039 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
David Green2352b302018-09-12 09:54:17 +00005040 // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
5041 // value out of it.
5042 Array->setAlignment(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType));
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005043 Kind = ArrayKind;
5044}
5045
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005046Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005047 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005048 case SingleValueKind:
5049 return SingleValue;
5050 case LinearMapKind: {
5051 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5052 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5053 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5054 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5055 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5056 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5057 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5058 return Result;
5059 }
5060 case BitMapKind: {
5061 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5062 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005063
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005064 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5065 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5066 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5067 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005068
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005069 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5070 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5071 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5072 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005073
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005074 // Shift down.
5075 Value *DownShifted =
5076 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5077 // Mask off.
5078 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5079 }
5080 case ArrayKind: {
5081 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5082 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5083 uint64_t TableSize =
5084 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5085 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5086 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5087 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5088 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005089
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005090 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5091 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5092 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
James Y Knight14359ef2019-02-01 20:44:24 +00005093 return Builder.CreateLoad(
5094 cast<ArrayType>(Array->getValueType())->getElementType(), GEP,
5095 "switch.load");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005096 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005097 }
5098 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5099}
5100
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005101bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005102 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005103 Type *ElementType) {
5104 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005105 if (!IT)
5106 return false;
5107 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5108 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005109
5110 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005111 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005112 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005113 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005114}
5115
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005116/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5117/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005118static bool
5119ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5120 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5121 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005122 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5123 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005124
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005125 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005126 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005127 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5128 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005129
5130 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005131 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005132
5133 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005134 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5135 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5136 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005137
5138 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5139 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5140 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5141 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005142 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005143 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005144
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005145 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5146 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5147 return true;
5148
5149 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5150 if (HasIllegalType)
5151 return false;
5152
5153 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5154 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5155 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5156 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005157}
5158
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005159/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5160/// \code
5161/// if (idx < tablesize)
5162/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5163/// else
5164/// r = default_value;
5165/// if (r != default_value)
5166/// ...
5167/// \endcode
5168/// Is optimized to:
5169/// \code
5170/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5171/// if (cond)
5172/// r = table[idx];
5173/// else
5174/// r = default_value;
5175/// if (cond)
5176/// ...
5177/// \endcode
5178/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005179static void reuseTableCompare(
5180 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5181 Constant *DefaultValue,
5182 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005183 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5184 if (!CmpInst)
5185 return;
5186
5187 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5188 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5189 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5190 return;
5191
5192 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5193 if (!CmpOp1)
5194 return;
5195
5196 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5197 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5198 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5199
5200 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5201 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5202 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5203 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5204 return;
5205
5206 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5207 // compare result.
5208 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5209 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005210 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005211 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005212 return;
5213 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5214 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5215 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005216
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005217 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5218 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5219 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5220 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5221 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5222 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5223 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5224 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5225 return;
5226 }
5227
5228 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5229 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5230 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5231 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5232 } else {
5233 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005234 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5235 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5236 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005237 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5238 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5239 }
5240}
5241
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005242/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5243/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5244/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005245static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5246 const DataLayout &DL,
5247 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005248 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005249
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005250 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5251 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5252 // attribute is not set.
5253 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5254 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005255 return false;
5256
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005257 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5258 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5259
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005260 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5261 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5262 // string and lookup indices into that.
5263
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005264 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005265 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005266 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005267 return false;
5268
5269 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005270 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Matthias Braun9fd397b2018-10-31 00:23:23 +00005271 assert(!empty(SI->cases()));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005272 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005273 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5274 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005275
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005276 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005277
5278 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005279 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005280
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005281 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5282 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5283 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005284
5285 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005286 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005287 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5288 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5289 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5290 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5291
5292 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005293 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005294 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005295 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005296 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005297 return false;
5298
5299 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005300 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5301 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5302 Constant *Value = I.second;
5303 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5304 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5305 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005306 }
5307 }
5308
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005309 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005310 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005311 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5312 }
5313
5314 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5315 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5316 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5317 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5318
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005319 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5320 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005321 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005322 bool HasDefaultResults =
5323 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5324 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005325
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005326 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5327 if (NeedMask) {
5328 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005329 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005330 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005331 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005332 return false;
5333 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005334
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005335 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5336 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5337 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005338 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005339 }
5340
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005341 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005342 return false;
5343
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005344 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005345 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005346 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5347 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005348
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005349 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005350 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005351 Value *TableIndex;
5352 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5353 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5354 else
5355 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5356 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005357
5358 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5359 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005360 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005361 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005362 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5363 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5364 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5365
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005366 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5367 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5368 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5369 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5370 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5371 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005372 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5373
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005374 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005375 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005376 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5377 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005378 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005379 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5380 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5381 RangeCheckBranch =
5382 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005383 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005384
5385 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5386 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005387
5388 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005389 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5390 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005391 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5392 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005393 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5394 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005395
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005396 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005397 // unnecessary illegal types.
5398 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5399 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5400 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005401 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005402 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5403 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005404 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5405 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005406 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5407 }
5408 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5409
5410 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5411 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5412 // else continue with table lookup.
5413 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005414 Value *MaskIndex =
5415 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5416 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5417 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5418 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005419 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5420
5421 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5422 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5423 }
5424
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005425 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005426 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005427 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5428 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5429 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5430 }
5431
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005432 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
George Burgess IVf9d26af2018-05-05 04:52:26 +00005433 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005434 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005435
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005436 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5437 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005438 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005439 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5440 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005441
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005442 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005443
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005444 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5445 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005446 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5447 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005448 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5449 ReturnedEarly = true;
5450 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005451 }
5452
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005453 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5454 // possible.
5455 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5456 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5457 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5458 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5459 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5460 }
5461 }
5462
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005463 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005464 }
5465
5466 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5467 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5468
5469 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005470 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005471 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005472
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005473 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005474 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005475 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5476 }
5477 SI->eraseFromParent();
5478
5479 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005480 if (NeedMask)
5481 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005482 return true;
5483}
5484
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005485static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5486 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5487 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5488 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5489 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5490 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5491 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005492
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005493 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5494}
5495
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005496/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5497/// of cases.
5498///
5499/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5500/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5501///
5502/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5503/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005504static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5505 const DataLayout &DL,
5506 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5507 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5508 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5509 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5510 return false;
5511 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5512 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5513 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5514 return false;
5515
5516 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5517 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5518 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5519 // as signed.
5520 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5521 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5522 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Fangrui Song0cac7262018-09-27 02:13:45 +00005523 llvm::sort(Values);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005524
5525 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5526 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5527 return false;
5528
5529 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5530 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5531 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005532 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005533
5534 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5535 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5536 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5537 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5538 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005539 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005540
5541 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5542 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5543 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5544 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5545 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5546 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5547 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5548 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005549 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005550 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5551 return false;
5552
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005553 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005554 for (auto &V : Values)
5555 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5556
5557 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5558 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5559 return false;
5560
5561 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5562 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5563 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5564 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5565 //
5566 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5567 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5568 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5569 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005570
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005571 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5572 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5573 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5574 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005575 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5576 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5577 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005578 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5579
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005580 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5581 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005582 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005583 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005584 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005585 }
5586 return true;
5587}
5588
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005589bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005590 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5591
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005592 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5593 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5594 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5595 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5596 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005597 return requestResimplify();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005598
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005599 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5600 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5601 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005602 return requestResimplify();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005603
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005604 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5605 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005606 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005607 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005608 return requestResimplify();
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005609 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005610
5611 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005612 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005613 return requestResimplify();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005614
5615 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005616 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005617 return requestResimplify();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005618
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005619 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005620 return requestResimplify();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005621
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005622 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005623 return requestResimplify();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005624
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005625 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5626 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5627 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5628 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5629 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005630 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5631 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005632 return requestResimplify();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005633
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005634 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005635 return requestResimplify();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005636
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005637 return false;
5638}
5639
5640bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5641 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5642 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005643
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005644 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5645 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5646 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5647 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005648 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005649 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5650 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005651 --i;
5652 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005653 Changed = true;
5654 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005655 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005656
5657 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5658 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5659 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005660 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005661 return true;
5662 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005663
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005664 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5665 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5666 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005667 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005668 return true;
5669 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005670
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005671 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5672 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005673 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005674 }
5675 return Changed;
5676}
5677
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005678/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5679/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5680/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5681/// a shared handler.
5682///
5683/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5684/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5685/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5686/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5687/// sinking in this file)
5688///
5689/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5690/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5691/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5692/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
Jesper Antonsson514b6b52018-06-28 10:55:04 +00005693/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005694/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5695///
5696/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5697/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5698/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5699static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5700 BasicBlock *BB) {
5701 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5702 assert(Succ);
5703 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5704 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5705 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5706 return false;
5707
5708 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5709 if (BB == OtherPred)
5710 continue;
5711 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5712 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5713 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5714 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005715 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5716 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005717 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5718 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5719 continue;
5720
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005721 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005722 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005723 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005724 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5725 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5726 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005727 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5728 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005729 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5730 }
5731
5732 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5733 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005734 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5735 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5736 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005737 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5738 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5739 }
5740
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005741 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005742 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5743 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5744 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5745 }
5746
5747 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5748 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5749 BI->eraseFromParent();
5750 return true;
5751 }
5752 return false;
5753}
5754
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005755bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5756 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005757 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005758 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005759
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005760 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005761 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5762 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005763 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5764 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005765 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5766 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005767 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005768 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Vedant Kumar4de31bb2018-11-19 19:54:27 +00005769 (LoopHeaders && BB->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(2) &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005770 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005771 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005772 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005773 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005774 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005775
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005776 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5777 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005778 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5779 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5780 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5781 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005782 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005783 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005784 return true;
5785 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005786
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005787 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5788 // equivalent.
5789 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005790 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5791 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005792 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005793 return true;
5794 }
5795
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005796 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5797 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5798 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5799 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005800 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005801 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005802 return false;
5803}
5804
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005805static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5806 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5807 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5808 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5809 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5810 return nullptr;
5811 PredPred = PPred;
5812 }
5813 return PredPred;
5814}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005815
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005816bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005817 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005818 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5819 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5820 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005821
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005822 // Conditional branch
5823 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5824 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5825 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5826 // switch.
5827 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005828 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005829 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005830
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005831 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5832 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005833 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005834 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005835 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005836 return requestResimplify();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005837 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005838 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005839 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005840 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005841 }
5842 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005843
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005844 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005845 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005846 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005847
Sanjay Patel7d82d372018-12-02 13:26:03 +00005848 // If this basic block has dominating predecessor blocks and the dominating
5849 // blocks' conditions imply BI's condition, we know the direction of BI.
5850 Optional<bool> Imp = isImpliedByDomCondition(BI->getCondition(), BI, DL);
5851 if (Imp) {
5852 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5853 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5854 ConstantInt *TorF = *Imp ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5855 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5856 BI->setCondition(TorF);
5857 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5858 return requestResimplify();
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005859 }
5860
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005861 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5862 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5863 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005864 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005865 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005866
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005867 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5868 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5869 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5870 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005871 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5872 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005873 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005874 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005875 } else {
5876 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005877 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005878 Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005879 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5880 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005881 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005882 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005883 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005884 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005885 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005886 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005887 Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005888 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5889 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005890 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005891 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005892 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005893
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005894 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5895 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5896 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5897 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005898 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005899 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005900
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005901 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005902 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5903 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005904 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005905 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005906 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005907
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005908 // Look for diamond patterns.
5909 if (MergeCondStores)
5910 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5911 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5912 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005913 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005914 return requestResimplify();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005915
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005916 return false;
5917}
5918
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005919/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5920static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5921 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5922 if (!C)
5923 return false;
5924
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005925 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005926 return false;
5927
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005928 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005929 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005930 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005931
5932 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5933 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005934 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5935 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5936 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5937 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005938 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005939 return false;
5940
5941 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5942 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5943 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5944 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5945
5946 // Look through bitcasts.
5947 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5948 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5949
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005950 // Load from null is undefined.
5951 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005952 if (!LI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005953 return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
5954 LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005955
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005956 // Store to null is undefined.
5957 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005958 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005959 return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
5960 SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005961 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005962
5963 // A call to null is undefined.
5964 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005965 return !NullPointerIsDefined(CS->getFunction()) &&
5966 CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005967 }
5968 return false;
5969}
5970
5971/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005972/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005973static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005974 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5975 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5976 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005977 Instruction *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005978 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5979 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005980 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005981 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5982 // destination from conditional branches.
5983 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5984 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5985 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005986 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5987 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005988 BI->eraseFromParent();
5989 return true;
5990 }
5991 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5992 }
5993
5994 return false;
5995}
5996
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005997bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005998 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005999
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00006000 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006001 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006002
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006003 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6004 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006005 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006006 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00006007 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006008 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6009 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006010 }
6011
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006012 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6013 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006014 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006015
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006016 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6017 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6018
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006019 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6020 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6021
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006022 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6023 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6024 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006025 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6026 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006027
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006028 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6029 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6030
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006031 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6032
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006033 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6034 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006035 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006036 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006037 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006038
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006039 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006040 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006041 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006042 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6043 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006044 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006045 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6046 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006047 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006048 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006049 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6050 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006051 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006052 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6053 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006054 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006055 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6056 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006057 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006058 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6059 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006060 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006061 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6062 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006063 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006064 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6065 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006066 }
6067
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006068 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006069}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006070
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00006071bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
6072 bool Changed = false;
6073
6074 // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
6075 do {
6076 Resimplify = false;
6077
6078 // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
6079 // another iteration is requested.
6080 Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
6081 } while (Resimplify);
6082
6083 return Changed;
6084}
6085
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006086bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6087 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006088 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006089 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006090 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006091 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006092}